2006 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual PDF

2006 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual PDF
2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................. ii
Important Handling Information..................................................................................................... iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 59
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Features ............................................................................................................................................ 105
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 185
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 197
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 227
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 265
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 285
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 299
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 303
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33S9VC30
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
WARNING: This product contains
or emits chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
car safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
Important Handling Information
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 198 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 223 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS(P. 61)
GAUGES (P. 70)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P. 11, 28)
SHIFT LEVER (A/T) (P. 200)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS* (P. 177)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P. 115)
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P. 82)
FRONT PASSENGER’S
AIRBAG
(P. 11, 28)
MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P. 93)
HEATING/COOLING
SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 106)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 94)
GLOVE BOX
(P. 99)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 188)
PARKING BRAKE
FUEL FILL DOOR
PEDAL
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 187)
(P. 97)
Vehicle with rear entertainment system is shown.
* : If equipped.
4
REAR A/C CONTROL
(P. 113)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P. 75)
HORN*
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON (P. 77)
VTM-4 LOCK*1
(P. 204)
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
(P. 102)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 35)
VSA OFF SWITCH
(P. 212)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P. 77)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P. 175)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS*1
(P. 138)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P. 78)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P. 175)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
(P. 74)
* : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Honda’’ logo.
*1 : If equipped.
5
Your Vehicle at a Glance
MOONROOF BUTTONS*1
(P. 96)
6
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9
Seat Belts ...................................... 10
Airbags .......................................... 11
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts ...................................... 15
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 21
Seat Belt System Components ... 21
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 23
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ........................... 25
Airbag System Components ....... 25
How Your Front Airbags
Work ..................................... 28
Advanced Airbags ....................... 30
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 33
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 35
Airbag Service .............................. 36
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 38
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 38
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 39
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 41
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 41
Additional Safety Precautions .... 42
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 43
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
With LATCH ................................ 47
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
With a Tether ............................... 51
Protecting Larger Children ............ 53
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 53
Using a Booster Seat ................... 54
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 55
Additional Safety Precautions .... 56
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Safety Labels .................................... 58
7
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 15 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
8
(see pages 38 − 56 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 227 ).
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(9)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(10)
(7)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(5) (7) (8)
(2)
(10) (6)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
(11) Side Curtain Airbags
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
9
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(11)
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
10
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
28 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 31 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
Your vehicle also has side curtain
airbags to help protect the heads of
the driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact (see page 33 for
more information on how your side
curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
11
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features, Protecting Adults and Teens
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
12
Remember however, that no safety
system can prevent all injures or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even where seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages 38 − 56 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate monitor indicator
on the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the tailgate is
not tightly closed.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 82 for how to lock the
doors, and page 66 for how the door
monitor indicator works.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down (see
page 78 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
CONTINUED
13
Driver and Passenger Safety
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and
tailgate are closed and locked.
Protecting Adults and Teens
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 87 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
14
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 87 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
The second row and third row center
seats have a detachable shoulder
belt that can be unlatched and
retracted to allow the seats to be
folded down. See page 18 for how to
unlatch and relatch the seat belts.
See page 91 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
RELEASE
BUTTON
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
16
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Protecting Adults and Teens
Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in the
Center Position
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable seat
belt anchor is correctly latched.
ANCHOR LATCH
Pull out the anchor latch and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
ANCHOR BUCKLE
ANCHOR LATCH
Insert the hook at the end of the
anchor latch into the anchor buckle
by lining up the triangle marks on
the anchor latch and buckle. Make
sure the belt is not twisted. Push the
anchor latch until it locks. Then
follow the procedure for fastening
and positioning an ordinary seat belt
(see page 15 ).
CONTINUED
17
Driver and Passenger Safety
Using a seat belt with the
detachable seat belt anchor
unlatched increases the chance
of serious injury or death in a
crash.
LATCH PLATE
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
SMALL LATCH PLATE
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
TRIANGULAR MARK
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert a key into the slot on the side
of the small buckle. Line up the
triangle marks on the plate and
buckle when reattaching the belt and
buckle.
18
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 21 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
19
Driver and Passenger Safety
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
Do not attach solid objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
20
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other solid object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before your seat
belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a small child is
riding there, the indicator will not
come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The seat belts use the same
monitoring system as the front
airbags. The system may not work
properly under these conditions:
Placing heavy items on the front
passenger’s seat.
The front passenger is not sitting
properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer if the indicator comes on or
the beeper sounds when there is no
front passenger or objects on the
front seat.
21
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all eight seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seat of the second and third row
seats is equipped with a detachable
anchor that has two parts: a small
latch plate and a buckle.
The detachable anchor should
normally be latched whenever the
seats-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable anchor (see page 18 ).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 15 for how to
properly position the belt).
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page 49 ).
22
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
as far as needed.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
254 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
If the front seat belt tensioners ever
activate, they must be replaced as
the belts will no longer retract
properly.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your Honda Warranty Information
booklet for details.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause a front, side, or side
curtain airbag to inflate.
CONTINUED
23
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
24
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(1)
(8)
(8)
(10)
(2)
Driver and Passenger Safety
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Position Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(11) Occupant Position Detection System
(OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
(14) Roll Rate Sensor
(3)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(14)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(13)
(9)
(7)
(5)
(4)
CONTINUED
25
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
(15) Rear Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensor (second)
(17) Side Curtain Airbags
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
(17)
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 31 ).
(16)
(15)
26
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. All pillars
are marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAG’’ (see page 33 ).
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 23 ).
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and automatically turn
the airbag off (see page 34 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
30 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
A roll rate sensor that monitors
the degree and rate your vehicle
may roll over and automatically
deploy the side curtain airbags and
activate the front seat belt
tensioners if needed (see page 33 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 33 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 34 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 35 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
27
Driver and Passenger Safety
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight of an infant or
small child is detected, the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 31 ).
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 35 ).
28
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Stage Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
or not the occupant is wearing a seat
belt.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
29
Driver and Passenger Safety
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
30
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS Indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in the front, if
the sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child, the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
When the airbag is turned off, an
indicator in the center of the
dashboard will come on indicating
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
35 ).
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
254 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
CONTINUED
31
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans into the side
airbag’s path.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
32
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 35 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
In a Rollover
If the roll rate sensor detects your
vehicle is about roll over, the control
unit will instantly deploy both side
curtain airbags.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
CONTINUED
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
34
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.
Canada This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does not mean there is a
problem with your side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off (see page 63 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
4WD
Canadian models
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
2WD
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect an infant or small child may
be in the front passenger’s seat. It
does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
If no one is riding in the front seat,
the airbag will be automatically shut
off. However, the indicator will not
come on.
If the indicator comes on with no
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a
problem with the advanced airbag
system. Have the vehicle checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
35
Driver and Passenger Safety
U.S. models
The passenger airbag off indicator
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
36
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Driver and Passenger Safety
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to liquid. If water or another liquid
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag cutoff
system from working properly.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
37
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
38
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 43 − 52 ).
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 53 − 56 ).
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 35 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 53 for important
information about protecting larger
children).
CONTINUED
39
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children age 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard (on
U.S. models, the dashboard label is
removed by the owner) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow
the instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
SUN VISOR
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
40
DASHBOARD
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 53 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 13 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in a back seat. The back seat
is far safer for a child than the
front.
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
18 ).
41
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
42
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 83 ).
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least
one year old.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
43
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
44
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 35 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
second row seats.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 47 ).
CONTINUED
45
Driver and Passenger Safety
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
46
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
Installing a Child Seat
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
BUTTON
LOWER
ANCHORS
Rigid-type
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
CONTINUED
47
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer second row
seats. The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
Installing a Child Seat
7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
ANCHOR
Flexible-type
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
5. Lift the head restraint (see page
91 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
48
Installing a Child Seat
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
49
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
Installing a Child Seat
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
50
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
Installing a Child Seat
Second Row Installation
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Your vehicle has attachment points
for a tether-style child seat to be
installed on the second or third row
as shown.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seatback.
1. Lift the head restraint, then route
the tether strap over the seat-back
between the legs of the head
restraint.
CONTINUED
51
Installing a Child Seat
Third Row Installation
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether attachment point, and
tighten the strap according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
There are three anchorage points on
the tailgate sill. Select the anchorage
point you want to use, and slide the
cover to open it (outboard anchor),
or remove the cover (center anchor).
Follow steps 1 and 2 of the second
row seat installation.
52
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
53
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
45 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
54
to drive.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Protecting Larger Children
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 16 and 53 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
55
Driver and Passenger Safety
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
56
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
57
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
U.S. models only
U.S. models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label, which is removed
by the owner), contact your dealer
for a replacement.
Canadian models
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
RADIATOR CAP
58
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Door Locks ....................................... 82
Power Door Locks ....................... 82
Tailgate ......................................... 82
Childproof Door Locks ............... 83
Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Seat Heaters ..................................... 86
Seats .................................................. 87
Head Restraints ............................... 91
Mirrors .............................................. 92
Power Windows ............................... 94
Moonroof .......................................... 96
Parking Brake .................................. 97
Interior Convenience Items ............ 98
Beverage Holders ........................ 99
Console Compartment ................ 99
Glove Box ..................................... 99
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 100
Sun Visor .................................... 101
Vanity Mirror ............................. 101
Accessory Power Sockets......... 101
Interior Lights ................................ 102
59
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 60
Instrument Panel ............................. 61
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62
Gauges .............................................. 70
Trip Meter .................................... 70
Odometer ...................................... 70
Fuel Gauge ................................... 70
Temperature Gauge .................... 71
Outside Temperature
Indicator .................................... 71
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 72
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 73
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 74
Turn Signal, Headlights,
Fog Lights .................................... 75
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature ...................................... 76
Daytime Running Lights............. 76
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76
Hazard Warning Button .................. 77
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 78
Keys and Locks ................................ 79
Immobilizer System......................... 79
Ignition Switch ................................. 81
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.61)
GAUGES (P.70)
SHIFT LEVER (A/T)
(P.200)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS* (P.177)
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P.82)
HEATING/COOLING
SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.106)
MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P.93)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.94)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.188)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.187)
*:
60
If equipped.
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.115)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
(P.97)
REAR A/C CONTROL
(P.113)
Instrument Panel
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.69)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.67)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR* (P.69)
PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.63)
A/T TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR* (P.68)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM (VSA) INDICATOR
(P.64)
VTM-4 INDICATOR*(P.68)
TPMS INDICATOR (P.65)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.65)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP (P.62)
BRAKE LAMP
INDICATOR (P.66)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR (P.69)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR*
(P.68)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.62)
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR (P.64)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P.67)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.62)
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR (P.66)
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR (P.65)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.62)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.63)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
* : If equipped.
61
Instruments and Controls
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.64)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.67)
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you and your
front passenger have not fastened
your seat belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.
62
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 21 .
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 277 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 276 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 276 .
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you try to drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock
brakes. For more information, see
page 210 .
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 34 .
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 278 .
63
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page 33 .
Instrument Panel Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
go off if you have inserted a
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page 79 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
(0) position.
64
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your vehicle checked by your dealer.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal driving ability, but will not
have VSA traction and stability
enhancement. See page 211 for more
information on the VSA system.
VSA Activation Indicator
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 211 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 211 .
Instrument Panel Indicators
Tire Pressure Monitor
The appropriate tire indicator will
come on along with the low tire
pressure indicator if a tire is
extremely underinflated or has
suddenly lost pressure. See Low
Tire Pressure Indicator for what to
do if this indicator comes on.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
65
Instruments and Controls
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition to the ON (II) position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure on the Tire
Pressure Monitor, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 266 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 278 ). Refer to page
205 for more information.
Instrument Panel Indicators
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 249 and 252 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
blink. All turn signals on the outside
of the vehicle should flash.
66
Brake Lamp Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
If a brake light does not work, the
BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on
when you push the brake pedal with
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Have your brake
lights repaired right away.
The appropriate indicator comes on
in this display if the tailgate or any
door is not closed tightly.
All of the indicators in the monitor
display come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Instrument Panel Indicators
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Canadian models only
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
175 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 75 .
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on (see page 76 ).
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 243 ).
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.80 U.S. gal (7.0 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
67
Instruments and Controls
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position with the headlight
switch off and the parking brake set.
It should go off if you turn on the
headlights or release the parking
brake. If it comes on at any other
time, it means there is a problem
with the DRL. There may also be a
problem with the high beam
headlights.
High Beam Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
A/T Temperature
Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator
Fuel Economy Indicator
4WD models only
4WD models only
2WD models only
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
68
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
On EX and EX-L models
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. See page
75 for information on fog light
operation.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
69
Instruments and Controls
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page 229 for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
Gauges
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
TRIP METER
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the outside temperature
display (except LX models) by
pressing the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly.
70
TRIP METER
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
On EX and EX-L models
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is shown in the
information display.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to ±5°F (±3°C) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press the Select/Reset
knob for 10 seconds. The following
sequences appear, 1 second at a
time: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2,
−1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2, −1, 0, 1).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the Select/
Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
71
Instruments and Controls
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle white mark. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper white mark. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page 242 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
Gauges
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears in the information display
after you start the engine. Turn the
engine off and confirm the fuel cap is
installed. If it is, loosen the cap, then
retighten it until it clicks at least
once. When you restart the engine,
the message appears again. To scroll
to another message, press the
select/reset knob.
72
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL goes
out after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If it does not go out, have
your dealer inspect the vehicle. For
more information, see page 277 .
Maintenance Minder Display
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 229 for
more information.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
MOONROOF BUTTONS*1
(P.96)
HORN*
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.75)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.77)
VTM-4 LOCK*1
(P.204)
VSA OFF SWITCH
(P.212)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P.175)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.77)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS*1
(P.138)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P.78)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.175)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
(P.74)
* : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Honda’’ logo.
*1 : If equipped.
73
Instruments and Controls
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
(P.102)
Windshield Wipers and Washers
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
INT − The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change to low speed operation
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
mph (20 km/h).
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
74
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
1. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
3. OFF
4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer without activating
the wiper.
Turn Signal, Headlights, and Fog lights
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. Headlights
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
7. Fog lights off (if equipped)
8. Fog lights on (if equipped)
Headlights − Turning the switch
on the left lever to the
position
turns on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the
position turns on the
headlights. If you leave the lights on
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
High Beams − To turn on the high
beams, push the lever forward until
you hear a click. The blue high beam
indicator will come on (see page 67 ).
To turn off the high beams, pull the
lever back. To flash the high beams,
pull the lever farther back, and then
release it. The high beams remain on
until the lever is released.
Fog Lights
On EX and EX-L models
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
75
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever in
the proper direction and hold it. The
lever will return to center when you
release it or complete a turn.
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
On EX and EX-L models
This feature turns off the headlights,
parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate lights, and
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds of removing the key from
the ignition switch and closing the
driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the
or
position, remove the key, then
open and close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after 10 minutes.
76
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn the switch
to the ‘‘
’’ position.
Instrument Panel Brightness
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Turn the knob to
adjust the brightness.
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
EX and EX-L models
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator
above the button comes on to show
the defogger is on. If you do not turn
it off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
LX models
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
77
Instruments and Controls
Push the red button to turn on the
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
Rear Window Defogger
Steering Wheel Adjustment
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel so it
points to your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
78
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER
KEY
(BLACK)
VALET KEY
(GRAY)
You should have received a key
number tag with your set of keys.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle
and the valet key at a parking facility.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
CONTINUED
79
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go out. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
80
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
lights on the instrument panel come
on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
81
Instruments and Controls
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
To lock the doors and the tailgate,
press the master door lock switch on
either front door, press the lock tab
down on the driver’s door, or use the
key on the outside lock on the driver’s
door.
Pressing up on either master door
lock switch will unlock all of the
doors and the tailgate.
82
The lock tab on any door locks and
unlocks that door. To unlock the
driver’s door from the outside, turn
the key and release it. If you turn
and hold it, all doors and the tailgate
unlock.
Tailgate
To lock the all doors when getting
out of the vehicle, push the lock tab
down and close the door. To lock the
driver’s door, remove the key from
the ignition switch and push the lock
tab down or push the under of the
master switch, then close the door.
Lockout Prevention
With the key in the ignition switch,
you cannot lock the all doors from
the outside by master door lock
switch or the lock tab on the driver’s
door.
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up. To close the tailgate, use
the inner handle to pull it down, then
press down on the back edge.
Keep the tailgate and the hatch glass
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and the
hatch glass, and to prevent exhaust
gas from getting into the interior.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 57 .
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Childproof Door Locks
Remote Transmitter
PANIC
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
Lock
LOCK
BUTTON
LED
LOCK LEVER
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior and interior lights will flash.
When you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the security system has
set. You cannot lock it if any door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on the interior
light control switch position, will
come on (see page 102 ). If you do
not open any door, the lights stay on
for about 30 seconds, then go out. If
you relock the doors and the tailgate
with the remote transmitter before
30 seconds have elapsed, the lights
will go off immediately.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
CONTINUED
83
Instruments and Controls
Unlock
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors and
the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button.
Remote Transmitter
PANIC − Press this button for
about 1 second to attract attention;
the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
SCREW
To replace the battery:
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
84
Remote Transmitter
BATTERY
TAB
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
4. Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (+ side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
Instruments and Controls
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
85
Seat Heaters
If equipped
SEAT HEATER BUTTONS
SEAT HEATER BUTTONS
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag system.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters.
86
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Seats
Power Seat Adjustment
Driver’s Lumbar Support
On EX and EX-L models
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
On EX and EX-L models
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat back angle.
Instruments and Controls
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moves the seat
forward and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down and
the rear of the seat up
or down.
Raises or lowers the
seat.
To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
87
Seats
Manual Seat Adjustments
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment
On LX models
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the front seat cushion. Then try to
move the seat to make sure it is
locked into position.
88
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up on the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to raise
the front of the seat bottom, and turn
the rear dial to raise the rear.
Seats
Adjusting the Second Row Seats
Folding the Second Row Seats
The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
Third Seat Access
2. Lower the head restraint fully.
SECOND
ROW SEAT
To change the angle of the seats in
the second row seat-backs, pull up
the handle on the seat-back. Moving
the short vertical switch forward or
backward adjusts the seat back in
those directions.
To adjust the seats forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion. After moving the
seat, make sure it is locked into
position.
3. Pull up the handle on the outside
of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to its upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked and secured
before driving.
RELEASE LEVER
To get into the third row seats, pull
up the lever on the outside of the
passenger’s side second row seatback. The seat-back will tilt forward,
and the seat will slide forward.
Push the whole seat backwards until
fully latches. Make sure the seat is
locked and secured before driving.
89
Instruments and Controls
1. If you are folding the left half of
the seat, use the ignition key to
release the center seat belt from
the detachable anchor (see page
18 ).
Seats
Adjusting the Third Row Seat
Folding the Third Row Seat
3. Use the ignition key to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page 18 ).
4. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
THIRD ROW
SEAT
Make sure you clip the small latch
plate of each outer shoulder belt to
the seat belt webbing whenever the
third seat is folded.
HANDLE
Pull the handle on the back of the
seat, move the seat-back to the
desired position and release the
handle. Let the seat-back latch into
the new position.
90
1. Remove the head restraints by
pushing the release buttons and
pulling the restraints out.
2. Store the head restraints under
the cargo area floor. Insert the
shafts into the holes in the sides of
the storage compartment.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to its upright position.
Reinstall the head restraints,
reconnect the seat belts, and make
sure the seats are secured before
driving.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 193 ).
Seats
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
Head Restraints
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
RELEASE BUTTON
See page 15 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
91
Instruments and Controls
The head restraints in the second
and third row seats adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. To raise it, pull upward. To
lower it, push the release button
sideways, and push the restraint
down.
Seats, Mirrors
Mirrors
If equipped
The rear view mirror has a compass
function to indicate the vehicle’s
direction.
Refer to Compass on page 177 .
TAB
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
92
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
Power Mirror Heaters
(If equipped)
Instruments and Controls
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch to keep your
settings.
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
93
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
94
AUTO − To open the driver’s
window, push the window switch
firmly down, then release it. To stop
the window from going all the way
down, pull back on the window
switch briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. To stop the window
from going all the way up, push
down on the window switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
The passenger windows cannot be
raised or lowered if the MAIN switch
is OFF. Keep the MAIN switch off
when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
Power Windows
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Instruments and Controls
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
95
Moonroof
If equipped
CLOSE BUTTON
TILT-UP
BUTTON
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
. To close the moonroof, press
and hold the upper button
. To
open the moonroof, press and hold
the lower button
. Release the
button when the moonroof gets to
the desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
OPEN BUTTON
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position.
96
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay
function. You can still open and close
the moonroof for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay function cancels as
soon as you open either front door.
You must then turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position to
operate the moonroof.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page 63 ).
97
Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASS HOLDER
WITH CONVERSATION
MIRROR
(EX-L models)
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
(EX and EX-L models)
98
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Console Compartment
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the rear door pocket beverage
holders when you close the rear
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets. The
front beverage holders can be
installed under the slide.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.
Pivot the door of the console forward
and you can store a cellular phone, a
small notepad, and business cards in
it.
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
99
Instruments and Controls
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses Holder
Conversation Mirror
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
100
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
On EX-L models
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers on this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visor
Vanity Mirror
EXTENSION
Accessory Power Sockets
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
SUN VISOR
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip and swing it out. Slide
the extension out to get more
coverage on side windows.
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
it.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.
The light will not come on if the sun
visor is slid outward.
The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
101
Instruments and Controls
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
AC Power Outlet
If equipped
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
in the rear compartment on the
driver’s side. To use the AC power
outlet, open the rear compartment
lid and open the outlet cover. Insert
the plug into the receptacle slightly,
turn it 90° clockwise, then push in
the plug all the way.
Always run the engine when you use
the AC Power Outlet.
102
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
NOTE: The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
Light Control Switch
ON
DOOR
ACTIVATED
POSITION
OFF
When this switch is in the ON position:
All the individual map lights come
on.
When the switch is in the OFF position:
None of the lights come on when a
door or the tailgate is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off with
the switches next to the lights.
Interior Lights
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows can be
turned on and off by pressing the
lens.
The tailgate light comes on when
you open the tailgate if the light
switch is in the ON position.
Courtesy Lights
Tailgate Light
The light in the tailgate has an on-off
switch to control if the light comes
on when the tailgate is opened.
Individual Interior Lights
The courtesy lights in the front
doors and around the ignition switch
come on when you open any door.
After you close the door, the ignition
switch light stays on for several
seconds.
The courtesy light between the map
lights comes on when you turn the
parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
The lights go out about 6 seconds
after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed. With any door or the
tailgate left open, the lights stay
on about 3 minutes, then go out.
103
Instruments and Controls
When the switch is in the Door
Activated position:
The individual map lights come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the
doors.
Individual Map Lights
Turn on the front and second row
individual map lights by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can also operate these lights
with the light control switch (see
page 102 ).
104
Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
On EX and EX-L models
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Setting the Clock ........................... 140
Rear Entertainment System ......... 142
Security System ............................. 174
Cruise Control ................................ 175
Compass.......................................... 177
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 180
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 184
105
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section describes those features and how to
use them.
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 106
Air Flow Buttons........................ 107
Automatic Climate Control....... 112
Using the Rear A/C Unit .......... 113
Audio System ................................. 115
Playing the Radio ........................... 117
Radio Reception ......................... 122
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .... 124
Playing a Disc ................................. 130
Disc Changer ..................... 131, 134
Protecting your CDs.................. 135
Disc Player Error Messages .... 136
Disc Changer Error
Messages ................................ 137
Remote Audio Controls................. 138
Radio Theft Protection.................. 139
Vents, Heating, and A/C
FAN CONTROL
TEMPERATURE RECIRCULATION REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON DIAL
CONTROL DIAL BUTTON
LX MODEL
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
MODE CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL
TEMPERATURE
BUTTONS
DISPLAY
FAN SPEED
INDICATOR
EX and EX-L MODEL
REAR A/C
MANUAL BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
106
RECIRCULATION WINDSHIELD
DEFROST
BUTTON
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
Vents, Heating, and A/C
On EX and EX-L models, see page
112 for information on automatic
climate control and semi-automatic
operation.
Fan Control
On LX models
On EX and EX-L models
Select the fan speed by pressing the
fan control buttons (
or
).
The fan speed is shown in vertical
bars in the display.
Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
On EX and EX-L models
The temperature setting is shown in
the display.
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
On EX and EX-L models
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the dial below
the outside air temperature.
RR A/C MANUAL Button
On EX and EX-L models
Press the RR A/C MANUAL button
to adjust the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment
independently. See page 113 for
information using the rear A/C unit.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
107
Features
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. On LX
models, the indicator in the button is
on when the A/C is on. On EX and
EX-L models, you will see A/C ON
or A/C OFF in the display.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 77 ).
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Mode Control
Use the mode control dial or button
to select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
On EX and EX-L models
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
108
On LX models
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
In this case, you cannot turn the A/C
off.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
On EX and EX-L models
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
MAX A/C
On LX models
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. In this mode, you cannot
turn off the A/C and also cannot
switch to fresh air mode.
When you switch to
from
, the A/C stays on, and you
can turn it on and off manually.
When you switch to another mode,
the A/C returns to its original setting,
either on or off, as displayed by the
A/C indicator.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
and fresh air mode.
1. Select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
71 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected (LX model), or the
display shows A/C ON (EX and
EX-L models).
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
109
Features
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
NOTE: The vehicle has two A/C
units, one is in the front, and the
other is in the rear. The LX units are
independently controlled. The EX
and EX-L units are controlled by the
front panel controls, unless the RR
A/C MANUAL button is selected.
On LX models
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select MAX A/C mode.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
110
To Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature control
dial to your preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator (LX model) or the
A/C ON indicator in the display
(EX and EX-L models) will not be
displayed if it was previously off.
3. Adjust the temperature control
dial so the airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
4. Select
rear window.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
On LX models
On EX and EX-L models
When you press
again or the
MODE button, the A/C returns to its
original setting, either on or off, as
displayed by the A/C ON or A/C
OFF indicator. If the original setting
is A/C OFF, the system switches to
AUTO.
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator (LX model) or the
A/C ON indicator in the display
(EX and EX-L models) will not be
displayed if it was previously off.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Features
When you switch to
, from
or
, the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button until the indicator in the
button comes on and then goes off.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below it. This will
send more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents.
Continuous use of the recirculation
mode can cause humidity to build up
inside the vehicle. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
111
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Automatic Climate Control
On EX and EX-L models
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Set the desired temperature by
turning the temperature control
dial. You will see FULL AUTO in
the system’s display.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (Lo) or its upper limit
(Hi), the system runs at full cooling
or heating only. It does not regulate
the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL in the display to go out.
To Turn Everything Off
Rear A/C Control − When the
On LX models
system is in FULL AUTO, the rear
A/C passenger control dial cannot
be used. Pressing the button disables
the FULL AUTO function.
Turning the fan control dial to the
off position shuts the system off.
On EX and EX-L models
If you press OFF, the climate control
system shuts off completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
112
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the Rear A/C Unit
On LX models
On EX and EX-L models
On LX models
A passenger in the second row can
use the rear fan control dial to adjust
the amount of airflow to the rear
passenger compartment.
COOL AIR
WARM AIR
Features
On EX and EX-L models
Press the RR A/C MANUAL button
to enable the rear temperature
control dial; a second row passenger
can now adjust the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment
with the rear temperature control
dial.
REAR A/C MANUAL BUTTON
OFF (center) − The rear A/C unit
shuts off.
Cool Air − Turn this dial
counterclockwise to increase the
airflow.
Warm Air − Turn this dial clockwise
to increase the airflow.
When the RR A/C MANUAL button
is on, you can adjust the temperature
of the rear passenger compartment
manually from the second row seat.
When the RR A/C MANUAL button
is off, the temperature in the rear
passenger compartment is controlled
by the front passenger with front
control panel.
CONTINUED
113
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
COOL AIR
WARM AIR
On EX and EX-L models
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OFF (center) − The rear A/C unit
shuts off.
Cool Air − Turn this dial
counterclockwise to increase the
temperature.
Warm Air − Turn this dial clockwise
to increase the temperature.
114
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Audio System
Some models may have one of the
audio systems described in this
section.
Read the appropriate pages in this
section for operation of the audio
systems installed in your models.
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System
Features
See page 117 to 121 for playing the
Radio.
AM/FM/CD Audio System
(LX models)
Only U.S. EX-L models
See page 124 to 129 for playing the
XM Satellite Radio.
See page 130 to 137 for playing a
Disc.
(EX models)
On U.S. models
(EX-L models)
On U.S. models
(EX models)
On Canadian models
(EX-L models)
On Canadian models
115
Audio System
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System
with rear entertainment system
(EX-L models)
On U.S. models
(EX-L models)
On Canadian models
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System with navigation system
(EX-L models)
On U.S. models
116
(EX-L models)
On Canadian models
Playing the Radio
STEREO INDICATOR
LX models
AM/FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
U.S. EX-L
models
AM/FM
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
Features
SEEK/SKIP BAR
EX and EX-L models
TUNE/MODE KNOB
EX-L models with rear entertainment system
STEREO INDICATOR
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE/SOUND
U.S. models
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
EX and
Canadian
EX-L models
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
SOUND KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK
AUTO SELECT BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS BUTTONS
Canadian
models
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK
BUTTONS
117
Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Turn the system on by
pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the
AM/FM button. (AM or FM button
on U.S. EX model and Canadian
model).
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio station on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK , SCAN, the
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
118
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
/(−) or
/(+)
side of the bar, then release it.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 5 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 5 seconds. When it plays a
station you want to listen to, press
the SCAN button again.
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Playing the Radio
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset buttons as
described previously.
Treble/Bass − Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
Adjusting the Sound
Press the MODE (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the Bass (BAS),
Treble (TRE), Fader (FAD), and
Balance (BAL) settings.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 76 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the MODE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. The
system will automatically return the
display to the selected audio mode
about five seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
Balance/Fader − These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
119
Features
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Playing the Radio
Operating the Radio on the
Navigation System Screen
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
Adjusting the Sound
AUDIO BUTTON
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages 118 and 119 .
On vehicles with navigation system
AUTO SELECT − Touch the A.
SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing
the display.
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and
bars on the radio control panel, you
can operate some of the radio
controls on the navigation system
screen.
SCAN − Touch the SCAN icon to
activate the scan function. You will
see SCAN in the display. Touch the
icon again to deactivate it.
120
To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
Playing the Radio
Treble/Bass − To adjust the treble
and bass, touch + or − on each side
of the treble or bass adjustment bar.
The adjustment bar shows you the
current setting.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 76 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
Features
Left/Right Balance and Front/
Rear Fader − These modes adjust
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.
121
Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
122
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
123
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. EX-L models
PWR/VOL
KNOB
XM RADIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
124
U.S. EX-L models with rear entertainment system
PWR/VOL XM RADIO BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
TUNE KNOB
DISP/MODE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. EX and EX-L models only
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
The navigation system screen also
shows all XM information when the
AUDIO button is pressed.
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
Features
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob. The last channel
you listened to will show in the
display.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, CD, etc., by
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display (navigation system
screen).
On vehicles with navigation system
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
CONTINUED
125
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob left
or right to select channels. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) −
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar ( − or + ) to select another
category.
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN/RPT button or
touch the SCAN icon on the audio
display. The system plays each
channel in numerical order for a few
seconds, then selects the next
channel. When you hear a channel
you want to continue listening to,
press the button or touch the icon
again.
126
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons or preset icons on the audio
display. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
3. Pick a preset number (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
beep.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
To store a channel:
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
2. Use the TUNE knob, or the
CATEGORY or SCAN buttons to
tune to a desired channel.
In the category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In the channel mode, all channels
can be selected.
5. Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
Features
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist or
is not part of your
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
127
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
128
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM satellite radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the XM RADIO
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
129
Features
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Playing a Disc
LX models
REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
CD EJECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
EX and EX-L models
CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD SLOT
RANDOM INDICATOR
CD EJECT
BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
130
EX-L models with rear entertainment system
CD EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
REPEAT
BUTTON
CD
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
To Play a CD
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1−6). On
models with navigation system,
touch the appropriate disc icon. If
you select an empty position in the
CD changer, the system will go into
the loading sequence.
On models with Satellite Radio
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the AUX/XM or XM
button.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button
(AM or FM button). Press the CD
button again to switch back to the
CD player.
131
Features
You operate the CD player/CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To select the CD
player/CD changer, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
LX models
Insert a CD into the CD slot. The
drive will pull the CD in the rest of
the way to play it. When the system
reaches the end of the disc, it will
return to the beginning and play the
disc again.
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
Except for LX model
1. Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
2. On the upper left side of the
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking,
and the green CD load indicator
will come on.
3. Insert the CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD loaded indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
132
4. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release
/(+), the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release
/(−)
to skip backward to the beginning of
the previous track.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing last CD loaded.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
/(+) or
/
(−). You will see CUE or REW in
the display.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the LOAD button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
REPEAT − To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press the RPT button again
to turn it off.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
RANDOM − This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. This continues until you
press the RDM button again.
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
Random Play within a Disc
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
To Stop Playing a CD
On LX models
When you press and release the RPT
button or touch the TRACK
REPEAT icon on the screen, the
system continuously replays the
current track. As a reminder, you
will see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in
the display. To turn this feature off,
press the RPT button, or touch the
TRACK REPEAT icon again.
When you press the RDM button or
touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on
the screen, the system plays the
tracks of the current disc in random
order. You will see RDM (TRACK
RANDOM) in the display. To turn
this feature off, press the RDM
button (touch TRACK RANDOM)
again.
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the radio while a CD is playing.
Press the CD button to play the CD.
Disc Repeat
On vehicles with navigation system
When you press and hold the RPT
button until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)
is in the display, or when you touch
the DISC REPEAT icon on the
screen, the system continuously
replays the current disc. As a
reminder, you will see D-RPT in the
display.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the CD will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
133
Features
Track Repeat
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
Except for LX model
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject (
) button. When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 15 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM/
FM or satellite radio). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remain there in a pause mode.
To remove a different CD from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the system beeps.
134
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
Optional on LX models
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The CD and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different CD, use the preset 5
(DISC −) or preset 6 (DISC +)
button. If you select an empty slot in
the magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot.
Protecting Your CDs
General Information
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality CDs labeled for audio
use.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping. See
this page.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Features
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
system.
Protecting CDs
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the CD changer.
135
Disc Player Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
LX models
Error Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error,
or a DVD has
been loaded in the
CD player
High Temperature
Solution
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation. If
the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
EX and EX-L models
Error Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error,
or a DVD has
been loaded in the
CD player
High Temperature
136
Solution
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation. If
the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Disc Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
Optional on LX models
Error Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
Press the magazine EJECT button and pull it
out. Check for an error message, and insert the
magazine again. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
Insert a CD.
Press the magazine EJECT button and pull it
out. Check for an error message and insert the
magazine again. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
This message should disappear when the
temperature returns to normal.
Insert the CD magazine.
137
Features
No CD in the CD
magazine
Solution
Remote Audio Controls
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The middle button adjusts the
volume. Press the top or bottom of
the button and hold it until the
desired volume is reached, then
release it.
The CH button has three functions,
depending on whether you are
listening to the radio, or playing a
CD.
The MODE button changes the
audio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,
XM, CD, and DVD/AUX (if a disc is
inserted).
138
CH BUTTON
MODE
BUTTON
VOLUME
BUTTON
If you are listening to the radio, use the
CH button to go to the next preset
station. You will see the number of
the preset button in the display. To
change bands, press the AM/FM
button.
If you are playing a CD, use the CH
button to skip to the beginning of the
next track. You will see the CD and
track number in the display.
Radio Theft Protection
On EX and EX-L models
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
next time you turn on the system.
Use the preset buttons (icons on
vehicles with navigation system) to
enter the code. The code is on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when the
power was disconnected.
Features
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five-digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
139
Setting the Clock
LX models
CLOCK
H BUTTON
EX and EX-L models
CLOCK BUTTON
RESET BUTTON
M BUTTON
CLOCK
SET BUTTON
H BUTTON
M BUTTON
140
Setting the Clock
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
LX models
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
EX and EX-L models
The display shows the time when the
ignition is in the ACCESSORY (I) or
the ON (II) position.
Press and hold the SET (TUNE)
button until the numbers flash.
Change the hours by pressing the
H (−) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M (+)
button until the numbers advance to
the desired time. When you are
finished, press the SET button again.
On models with Navigation System
Refer to the Navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
141
Features
Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/
RPT) button. Change the hours by
pressing the H (preset 4) button
until the numbers advance to the
desired time. Change the minutes by
pressing the M (preset 5) button
until the numbers advance to the
desired time. When you are finished,
release the CLOCK button.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing and
holding the clock button, then
pressing the RESET (preset 6)
button sets the clock back to the
previous hour. If the displayed time
is after the half hour, the clock sets
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
Rear Entertainment System
EX-L models
REAR ICON
REAR CONTROL OFF ICON
REAR SPEAKER OFF ICON
DVD/AUX BUTTON
REAR POWER
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
REAR CTRL KNOB
142
PAUSE
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
Rear Entertainment System
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
Rear Speakers
When you turn on the system, the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
upper display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the wireless
headphones.
The rear system selects the source it
was last set to. If that source has
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
display. You must select another
source.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
If you want to turn the rear speakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until the Rear Speakers
Off icon goes off.
143
Features
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (AM/FM
radio, XM radio, CD changer, or
DVD player) than the front seat
occupants. The audio is broadcast
through the supplied wireless
headphones.
To Turn On the System
Press the REAR PWR button. To
turn on the rear controls (ceiling
panel/remote control), press the RR
CTRL knob. The system’s icon
shows in the upper display. Your
passengers can then operate the rear
system with the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can be
used as a remote control when it is
detached from the ceiling unit. Press
the RR CTRL knob again to turn the
rear controls off. You will see the
Rear Controls Off icon in the upper
display.
Rear Entertainment System
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, turn the
RR CTRL knob clockwise. The
amber RR LED comes on to show
that the control panel is enabled.
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs and CDs. It features
Dolby* noise reduction.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
*
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
If a CD is loaded in the main CD
player or CD changer, select CD/
CHG. If the CD is loaded in the
lower player, select DVD/AUX.
144
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
OPEN BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
Rear Entertainment System
Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.
The amber Rear LED comes on to
show that the control panel is now
enabled.
Insert a DVD into the DVD/CD
player below the front panel.
REAR CTRL KNOB
PLAY − Press the PLAY button if
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
EJECT
BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON PAUSE
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PAUSE − Press the PAUSE button
to pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
CONTINUED
145
Features
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
Rear Entertainment System
SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the
+ button to move forward; you will
see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and
hold the − button to move
backward; you will see ‘‘REV’’ in the
display. Release the button when the
system reaches the point you want.
Each time you press and release the
+ button of the SEEK/SKIP, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the −
button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track or
chapter. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.
146
EJECT − Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the REAR
CTRL knob counterclockwise.
Using the Rear Control Panel
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the PWR button. Use the AM/
FM button, XM RADIO button (U.S.
models), CD button, DVD/AUX
button (U.S. models), or AUX button
(Canadian models) to select the
entertainment source. The selected
source will be shown in the display.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled with the REAR
CTRL knob on the front panel.
Rear Entertainment System
Features
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
station from the radio preset buttons.
Press the ▲ button to tune the radio
to a higher frequency, or press the▼
button to tune to a lower frequency.
Pressing the
or
button
causes the system to search up or
down the band for a station with a
strong signal. You will see SEEK in
the display.
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
station from the radio preset buttons.
Press the
button to search up
the channels in the channel mode.
The system will search up the
channels within the category when
the radio is in the category mode.
Press the
button to search
down the channels in the channel
mode. The system will search down
the channels within the category
when the radio is in the category
mode.
CONTINUED
147
Rear Entertainment System
Press the
or
button to
select another category.
Pressing and holding the DISP
button for more than 5 seconds will
change the search mode between
Channel Search and Category
Search. Each time you press and
release the DISP button, the display
above the rear control panel changes
in the following sequence: Channel
Number, Category Name, Music
Name, Artist Name, Channel Name,
and back to Channel Number.
148
To Play a CD from the Rear
Control Panel
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,
select them by pressing the CD
button. If a CD is loaded in the DVD
player, press the DVD/AUX button.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
button.
The system will continue to move
through the track. Press the
button to move forward, or the
button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button changes
the discs.
Rear Entertainment System
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Features
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OPEN
BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Press the
button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the
or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the
button to
move forward, or the
button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU/SCROLL button
(U.S. models) or MENU button
(Canadian models). Use the
,
,
, and
buttons to
move to the desired menu selection,
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
149
Rear Entertainment System
DISP Button
When you press the DISP button
while a DVD is playing, the title,
chapter, elapsed time, and personal
surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 1).
150
When you press the DISP button
again, the subtitle, audio, angle,
sound characteristics, and personal
surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 2).
To go back to play, press the DISP
button.
Rear Entertainment System
System Messages
Play Mode
When you press the MENU button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s
main menu is displayed. To go back
to play, press the MENU button
again.
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s
setup menu is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. You can then
change various settings of play mode,
personal surround, and display. To
go back to play without changing any
setting, press the RETURN or
SETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ by
pressing the
or
button,
then press the ENT button.
When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ by
pressing the
or
button, the
play mode setup menu is displayed
above the ‘‘Play Mode’’ icon.
Features
MENU Button
CONTINUED
151
Rear Entertainment System
Top Menu
Audio
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’
using the ▼ or ▲ button, the DVD’s
title menu is displayed. This menu is
also displayed when you press the
MENU button while a DVD is not
playing.
To go back to play, press the return
button.
152
When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from the
play mode setup menu by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button, you will see a
submenu of the dubbed language.
Select the desired language by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. The
sound characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language are also
displayed next to the language.
Rear Entertainment System
Subtitle
Angle
Features
To turn the subtitle on and off, select
‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will
see submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select
‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the ▼ or
▲ button.
If more than one subtitle language is
available, you will see the language
currently selected when you select
‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.
Select the desired subtitle language
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
On some DVDs, the scenes are
recorded by more than one camera,
giving different viewpoints of the
same scene. To change the angle,
select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.
You will see a submenu if there are
different angles available.
Select the number on the submenu
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
CONTINUED
menu.
153
Rear Entertainment System
Search
When you select the ‘‘Search’’ from
the play mode setup menu, you will
see the submenu shown above. In
the left submenu, you can select
between ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ The
right submenu displays the current
title or chapter number and the total
number of titles or chapters.
154
To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. Change
the number on the right submenu by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and
press the ENT button to begin the
title search. If you press the
RETURN button, the display returns
to the play mode setup menu without
doing the search.
To do a chapter search, select
‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button. Change the number on the
right submenu by pressing the ▼ or
▲ button, and press the ENT button
to begin the chapter search. If you
press the RETURN button, the
display returns to the play mode
setup menu without doing the search.
Rear Entertainment System
Num Input
Features
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a two digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the play
mode setup menu. The screen will
change as shown above. If you select
the ‘‘Move Key’’ using the
,
,
, or
button, and
press the ENT button, the Num
Input display on the screen will
change from the left side to right
side or right to left.
Select the first digit number using
the
,
,
, or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. If you want to
change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
and press the ENT button, then
select and enter the new number.
Select and enter the second digit
number the same way. The cursor
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’
icon when you press the ENT button.
Press the ENT button to enter the
number command. To go back to the
DVD screen, press the RETURN
button.
CONTINUED
155
Rear Entertainment System
Personal Surround
are playing.
Display
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.
When you select ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ by pressing the
or
button, the personal
surround setup menu is displayed
above the ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ icon.
Selecting one of the sound effects,
Cinema, Music, or Voice, from the
personal surround menu allows you
to change the sound in your
headphones to match the disc you
156
To adjust the display, select
‘‘Display’’ by pressing the
or
button, and enter your
selection by pressing the ENT
button. The display changes as
shown above.
You can adjust these display
settings:
Back Light
Contrast
Brightness
Tint
Color
Rear Entertainment System
Features
Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and
then pressing the ENT button. The
adjustment bar is displayed next to
the selected item. Adjust the setting
by pressing the
or
button.
When you are finished with your
adjustment, press the ENT button.
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and,
then pressing the ENT button.
The display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.
157
Rear Entertainment System
Screen Mode
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
158
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
Rear Entertainment System
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for one second,
and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.
Features
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the
or
button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, then
press the ENT button.
CONTINUED
159
Rear Entertainment System
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu
INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
Menu Language
When you press the SETUP button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
When you select ‘‘Language’’ with
the
or
button, the menu
shown above appears.
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will
see the submenu next to ‘‘Menu
Lang.’’
There are two selectable menus:
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’
160
To return to the stop or prestop
screen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the
or
button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
Rear Entertainment System
Features
Select the desired language by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and
then pressing the ENT button.
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, German,
Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT
button. The display changes as
shown in the next column.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
menu.
CONTINUED
161
Rear Entertainment System
Audio Language
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first number using
the
,
,
, or
button, and press the ENT
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four numbers are entered. When the
fourth number is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
162
If you made a mistake entering a
number, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the display
with the
,
,
, or
button, and press the ENT
button on the control panel. Then
select and enter the correct number
as described. The display returns to
the initial ‘‘Language’’ menu screen.
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the
▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
Rear Entertainment System
INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)
Dynamic Range
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
submenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’
When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the
bottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’
screen, the above menu appears on
the screen.
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Features
Subtitle Language
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
163
Rear Entertainment System
Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic
Range’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button, you will see the submenu
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as
shown above.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the
or
button, and then
press the ENT button.
164
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.
Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
▼ or ▲ button. The above submenu
appears. If you want the angle mark
to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
or
button, and then press
the ENT button. The display returns
to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
Rear Entertainment System
Parental Control Level
Features
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
submenu shown above. If you select
‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, the
display returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
the display changes as shown above.
To change the level, you need to
enter your four digit password.
Select the number for the first digit
by pressing the
,
,
, or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
CONTINUED
control panel.
165
Rear Entertainment System
Changing the Password
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password.
166
If you enter the password correctly,
you can then change the parental
control level.
Once you correctly enter the
password, press the ▼ or ▲ button
to change the level, and then press
the ENT button to enter your
selection.
The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
when the vehicle left the factory.
Rear Entertainment System
Features
To change the password, select
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by
pressing the
or
button,
then press the ENT button.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
Select the first number by pressing
the
,
,
, or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four number are entered. When you
enter the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
password setting steps until you
enter the correct password.
CONTINUED
167
Rear Entertainment System
If you forget the password, select
‘‘Password,’’ and press the ▲ button
10 times.
The display changes as shown above.
If you want to use the default
password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
press the ENT button.
The message ‘‘Default password
setting applied’’ is displayed for
5 seconds.
168
Rear Entertainment System
Remote Control
Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
RELEASE BUTTON
COVER
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Battery type: BR3032
169
Features
As required by the FCC: This device
complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Rear Entertainment System
Playable DVDs
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
170
Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 135 .
Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
screen while operating the DVD
player, find the cause in the chart to
the right. If you cannot clear the
message, take your vehicle to a
dealer.
Message
ERROR F0
ERROR F2
Invalid region code
Invalid disc
Eject the disc and reinsert it.
Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc
compatible with this system.
Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (see
pages 165 and 166 ).
171
Features
Parental control active.
Change level to view.
Solution
Rear Entertainment System
Wireless Headphones
VOLUME
DIAL
Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
172
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. The antennas
are in the front of the earpieces. If
you wear the headphones backwards,
the antennas will be aimed away
from the system, affecting the sound
quality and range.
Replacing Batteries
TAB
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.
Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.
Rear Entertainment System
Auxiliary Input Jacks
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
COVER
BATTERY
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
173
Features
VOLUME
DIALS
Security System
On EX and EX-L models
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle. This alarm continues for 2
minutes, then the system resets. To
reset an alarm system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s front door with the key or
the remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator next to the driver’s door
lock starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
174
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
The security system will not set if
the hood, the tailgate, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the Door and Tailgate
Open Monitor on the instrument
panel (see page 66 ) to see if the
doors and the tailgate are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door without using the
key or the remote transmitter, or the
hood, will cause it to alarm. It also
alarms if the radio is removed from
the dashboard or the wiring is cut.
Cruise Control
Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCEL
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
RESUME/ACCEL
Features
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
SET/DECEL
1. Push in the cruise control master
button. The indicator on the
instrument panel will come on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The indicator on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
175
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, and press the SET/DECEL
button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
176
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Canceling Cruise Control
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the cruise control master
button.
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap on the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the cruise control master
button turns the system off and
erases the previous cruising speed.
Compass
Compass Function
If equipped
COMPASS
BUTTON
CENTER ICON
The direction and center position
icons come on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
The compass can be affected by
driving near power lines or stations,
across bridges, through tunnels,
over railroad crossings, past large
vehicles, or driving near large
objects that cause magnetic
interference. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
The compass mirror has a light
sensor behind the right side of the
rear view mirror. Make sure the
extended sun visor or an accessory is
not covering the sensor.
To turn the compass on or off, press
the compass button on the back of
the rear view mirror.
177
Features
Your vehicle has a compass in the
rear view mirror. The compass
indicates the vehicle direction with
illuminated letters; N (north), S
(south), W (west), and E (east). The
center blue icon in the compass is
always on. It serves as a reference
point.
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Compass
Compass Calibration
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to continually show
the wrong direction, do this.
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
1. With the blue center icon
displayed, press and hold the
compass button for about 6
seconds. When the center icon
turns red, release the button.
2. Drive the vehicle slowly in circles
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until
the center icon turns blue. This
icon also turns blue by continuing
to drive the vehicle under normal
driving conditions. When you see
an actual heading on the compass,
calibration is completed.
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
1. Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page 179 ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page 179 ).
178
2. Press and hold the compass
button for about 3 seconds. When
all of the direction icons begins to
blink, release the button.
3. The blue direction icon(s) blink
and show the current zone.
4. If the zone is incorrect, press and
release the compass button
repeatedly to get to the correct
number.
5. The compass will return to the
normal display about 4 seconds
after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
Compass
Zone Map
Compass Display for Each Zone
Features
179
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If equipped
The HomeLink universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
General Information
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. They do not
180
have the safety feature that causes
the motor to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury.
Important Safety Precautions
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote control
transmitter for the device (garage
door, automatic gate, security
system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
1. Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
HomeLink.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
5. Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
6. Push and hold the HomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
Go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page 182 ).
7. Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
181
Features
3. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
4. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training With a Rolling Code
System
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
1. Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
182
TRAINING BUTTON
4. Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
6. Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
3. Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Erasing Codes
To erase the codes stored in all three
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
2. Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
180 ).
Customer Assistance
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
183
Features
You should erase all three codes
before selling the vehicle.
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
Rear View Camera and Monitor
On EX-L models with navigation system
When in reverse, the touch screen
and Navi ‘‘hard’’ buttons are locked
out, except the ‘‘ZOOM’’ button.
Touching the ‘‘▼’’ or ‘‘▲’’ button
allows you to adjust the brightness of
the rear view camera image.
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.
Whenever you shift to R (reverse)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the
rear view camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens.
184
Since the rear view camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 186
Fuel Recommendation .................. 186
Service Station Procedures .......... 187
Refueling..................................... 187
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 188
Oil Check .................................... 189
Engine Coolant Check .............. 189
Fuel Economy ................................ 190
Accessories and Modifications .... 191
Carrying Cargo .............................. 193
185
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
186
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page 220 ).
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
SLIT
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Pull
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the gas pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Put the attachment into the slit.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Consult your dealer.
ATTACHMENT
FUEL FILL CAP
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 277 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
187
Before Driving
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Service Station Procedures
Opening the Hood
To Close the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
188
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
3. Pull the support rod out of its clip,
and insert the end into the hole at
the center of the hood or the hole
on the left side of the hood.
CLIP
SUPPORT ROD
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Engine Coolant Check
RESERVE TANK
MIN
DIPSTICK
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 239 .
3. Insert it all the way back into its
tube.
MAX
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 242 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 234 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
189
Before Driving
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
schedule. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks (see page
234 ).
For example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
190
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Every time you slow down and
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
any accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page 192 for
additional information.)
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 283 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
191
Before Driving
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
192
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
See Additional Safety
Precautions on page 37 .
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Carrying Cargo
GLOVE BOX
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
DOOR POCKETS
REAR COMPARTMENT
Front door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Rear compartment
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
CARGO AREA
193
Before Driving
Console compartment
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
194
Steps for determining correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 1,158
lbs (525 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s
placard (on the driver’s doorjamb).
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
1,158 pounds or 525 kg kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 1,158 lbs and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 408 lbs.
(1,158 − 750 (5 × 150) = 408 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
in the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle (see page 213 ).
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 57 .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Optional Separation Net
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used over
the cargo area behind the third row
seats. When the third row seats are
folded down, the cargo cover can be
installed in a forward position and
extended over the larger cargo area.
195
Before Driving
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the pedals or seat operation.
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Net
If equipped
The hooks on each side of the
tailgate and on the underside of the
cargo area storage compartment lid
are for plastic grocery bags. To use
the hook on the storage
compartment lid, open the lid, and
attach the cord to one of the shafts
of the third seat center head
restraint.
196
You can use the cargo net to secure
items in the cargo area, and store
small items between the two halves
of the net. To install the cargo net,
hooks on the four corners of the net
to the tabs at both sides of the cargo
floor.
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the VTM-4 system (4WD
models only), the VSA system, the
tire pressure monitoring system, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
197
Driving
Driving Guidelines ......................... 198
Starting the Engine........................ 199
Automatic Transmission............... 200
VTM-4 System ............................... 204
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 205
Parking Tips ................................... 207
Braking System.............................. 208
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 209
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 211
VSA Off Switch .......................... 212
Towing a Trailer ............................ 213
Trailer Driving Tips....................... 220
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 223
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has a higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
198
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
3. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
4. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 87 ).
See page 223 for additional driving offhighway guidelines.
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 258 ).
5. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 92 ).
6. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 78 ).
7. Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
8. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 15 ).
9. When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 61 ).
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 79 .
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Driving
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
199
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Shifting
SHIFT LEVER
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
200
To shift from any position, pull the
lever toward you. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
Automatic Transmission
To shift from:
P to R
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the shift lever.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 203 .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear for the vehicle speed
and acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop and then shift.
CONTINUED
201
Driving
R to P
N to R
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D
D to N
D to D3
N to D
R to N
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D3) − This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D3
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D3 can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
Second (2) − This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
202
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
First (1) − This position locks the
transmission in first gear. By
upshifting and downshifting through
1, 2, D3, and D, you can operate the
transmission much like a manual
transmission without a clutch pedal.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal
and pulling the shift lever does not
shift the transmission out of Park:
1. Set the parking brake.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover next to the
shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver or finger nail file to
remove the cover. Carefully pry
off the edge of the cover.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
5. Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to neutral.
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then install the
cover. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
Driving
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
203
VTM-4 System
4WD models only
The variable torque management
4WD (VTM-4) system automatically
transfers varying amounts of engine
torque to the rear wheels under
lower traction conditions.
If more traction is needed when your
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to
become stuck, you can use the
VTM-4 lock button to increase
torque to the rear wheels.
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock
1. The vehicle must be stopped with
the engine running.
2. Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
3. Press the VTM-4 lock button. The
indicator in the button comes on.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
204
To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do
any of the following:
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
Move the shift lever to D or D3.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
The VTM-4 lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It will
automatically engage again as the
speed slows below 18 mph (30
km/h). The indicator in the button
will remain on.
Do not continually spin the f ront tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif f erential damage.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and this owner’s manual (see
page 289 ).
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
205
Driving
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire on the tire pressure
monitor to come on.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is on, one
or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
tire information placard.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitor
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See Low Tire
Pressure Indicator on page 205 .
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page 266 ).
206
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire, the
low tire pressure indicator stays on.
This is normal; the system is not
monitoring the spare tire pressure.
Manually check the spare tire
pressure to be sure it is correct.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Parking Tips
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly or
your vehicle may roll if it is on an
incline.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
On vehicles with security system
Check the indicator on the driver’s
door to verify that the security
system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
207
Driving
Lock the doors.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
208
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Driving
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
209
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 278 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
210
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output,
and by selectively applying the
brakes.
VSA Activation Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page 212 ).
VSA System Indicator
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
Driving
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
211
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
VSA Off Switch
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 258 ).
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the vehicle stability
assist system on and off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
212
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page 266 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as for carrying
passengers and their cargo.
Load Limits
To safely tow a trailer, you should
observe the load limits, use the
proper equipment, and follow the
guidelines in this section.
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Total Trailer Weight: The maximum
weight of the trailer and everything
in or on it depends on the number of
occupants in your vehicle and the
type of trailer being towed (see page
215 ).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance.
Tongue Load: The weight that the
tongue of a fully loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be 5 to 10
percent of the total trailer weight for
boat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent of
total trailer weight for all other
trailers. (See page 215 for limits for
your towing situation). Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
213
Driving
Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
223 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
05/07/21 11:00:21 31S9V630 0219 Towing a Trailer
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo and the tongue
load is 5,840 lbs (2,650 kg) for 2WD,
and 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg) for 4WD.
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) − The maximum
allowable weight on the vehicle axles
for 2WD is 2,865 lbs (1,300kg)on the
front axle, and 3,085 lbs (1,400kg)on
the rear axle; for 4WD it is 2,865 lbs
(1,300 kg) on the front axle, and
3,155 lbs (1430 kg) on the rear axle.
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 9,700 lbs (4,410
kg) with the proper hitch and fluid
coolers (see page 217 ).
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
214
Estimating Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described.
3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to
the hitch.
4. Measure again from the ground to
the same spot on the bottom of the
hitch.
5. Subtract the second measurement
from the first measurement, then
refer to the following table.
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page 215 to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
If the
difference is:
Estimated
tongue load is:
1 ½’’
2 ¼’’
3’’
3 ¾’’
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
To Estimate the Tongue Load
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Measure from the ground to the
bottom of the trailer hitch.
If the difference is more than 3 ¾
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:
BOAT TRAILERS
Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Max. Trailer Weight
Max. Tongue Load
4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
4,300 lbs (1,945 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
4,100 lbs (1,855 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
2,000 lbs (905 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Towing is Not Recommended
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Max. Trailer Weight
Max. Tongue Load
3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
3,300 lbs (1,490 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
3,100 lbs (1,400 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
2,700 lbs (1,220 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
1,200 lbs (540 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Towing is Not Recommended
Driving
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)
of luggage in the cargo area.
215
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg)
1. Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)
3. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 3,086 lbs (1,400 kg)
4. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 9,700 lbs (4,410 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
5. Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
216
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
6. Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page 215 .
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
To help prevent overheating, a
heavy-duty transmission fluid cooler
and a heavy-duty power steering
fluid cooler are required for trailer
towing. These coolers are available
only from your dealer.
Weight Distributing Hitch
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
217
Driving
7. Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in Step 5 from
the weight in step 6.
Limit: See page 215 .
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers
8-15% for other trailers
Your dealer offers a trailer package
that includes a hitch, a ball mount, a
wiring harness, a heavy-duty
transmission fluid cooler, and a
heavy-duty power steering fluid
cooler.
Hitch
We strongly recommend that you
have your dealer install a Honda
hitch and use the required fluid
coolers. Using non-Honda equipment
may result in serious damage to your
vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes
Safety Chains
Spare Tires
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455
kg) or more has its own brakes.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. See page 258 for proper
tire size, page 270 for how to store a
full size wheel and tire, and page
267 for information on changing a
flat tire.
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
See your trailer manufacturer for
more information on installing
electric brakes.
218
Sway Control
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
GROUND
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(BLACK)
(GREEN/WHITE)
BATTERY POWER
(YELLOW)
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the mating connector and
pins that mate with the connector in
your vehicle from your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Driving
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
TAILLIGHT
(GREEN/YELLOW)
(RED/BLACK)
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
To get to your vehicle’s trailer
lighting connector, open the tailgate,
remove the cargo cover, then
remove the rear panel trim. The
connector is on the left side.
219
Trailer Driving Tips
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
220
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 186 ).
Trailer Driving Tips
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on Hills
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D3. Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
221
Driving
To prevent the transmission from
shifting frequently, drive in the D
position.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Trailer Driving Tips
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Retrieving a Boat
If the vehicle’s wheels slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page 204 ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
222
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance and fourwheel drive VTM-4 system allow you
to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,
and similar locations. It is not
designed for trailblazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging offroad activities.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Be sure to store cargo properly,
and do not exceed your vehicle
cargo load limits (see pages
194 and 213 ).
Be aware that a heavy load can
reduce ground clearance and your
ability to clear obstacles.
Wherever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions
allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
223
Driving
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Check Out Your Vehicle
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
Remember
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
224
Accelerating and Braking
For better traction on all surfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Avoiding Obstacles
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
Driving on Slopes
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Crossing a Stream
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushing water can wash the
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
If You Get Stuck
If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
Lock (see page 204 ). Carefully try to
go in the direction (forward or
reverse) that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high
speeds. It will not help you get out
and may cause damage to the
transmission or VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose.
Use a nylon strap to attach the Pilot
to the recovery vehicle and carefully
take out the slack in the strap. Once
the strap is tight, the recovery
vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
CONTINUED
225
Driving
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.
Proceed without shifting or changing
speeds, and do not stop the vehicle
or shut off the engine.
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
You may be able to safely tow a
lightweight trailer (such as a
motorcycle or small tent trailer) offroad if you follow these guidelines.
Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
kg).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
226
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance messages in the
information display, a maintenance
record, and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
227
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 303 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 228
Maintenance Minder ..................... 229
Maintenance Record ..................... 236
Fluid Locations............................... 238
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 239
Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 240
Engine Coolant ............................... 242
Windshield Washers ..................... 243
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 244
Differential Oil ............................... 245
Timing Belt ..................................... 245
Brake Fluid ..................................... 246
Power Steering Fluid..................... 247
Lights .............................................. 248
Floor Mats ...................................... 254
Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 254
Wiper Blades .................................. 255
Tires ................................................ 257
Checking the Battery .................... 262
Vehicle Storage .............................. 263
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
228
with the battery or compressed air.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations, and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items in the
information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
Engine Oil Life Display
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 %
90 %−81 %
80 %−71 %
70 %−61 %
60 %−51 %
50 %−41 %
40 %−31 %
30 %−21 %
20 %−16 %
15 %−11 %
10 %−6 %
5 %−1 %
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
CONTINUED
229
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the Select/Reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life display
appears (see page 70 ).
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the engine oil life
display according to this table:
Maintenance Minder
ENGINE OIL LIFE
MAINTENANCE
INDICATOR
MINDER
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
230
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 235 ).
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ message
along with the same maintenance
item code(s), every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Maintenance Minder
The maximum total mileage shown
is ‘‘−9999.’’
You can change the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the Select/Reset knob.
If you still do not perform the
indicated maintenance, you will see a
negative mileage. It is displayed
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0 percent
message. Afterward, it shows your
driving distance if you continue to
drive. Immediately have the
indicated maintenance done by your
dealer.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described in the next
page.
231
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will be blinking. The display comes
on every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed by
your dealer as soon as possible.
When the engine oil life display is 0
percent or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
remains on even if you change the
information display.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE
When the vehicle needs
maintenance, maintenance codes
appear on the information display.
For an explanation of the
maintenance codes, see page 235 .
232
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the Select/Reset knob until
the engine oil life indicator is
displayed.
3. Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 10 seconds. The engine
oil life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
CONTINUED
233
Maintenance
4. Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 189 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 189 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
244 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 246 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
258 .
234
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 248 .
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months after
the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 233 .
4
NOTE:
Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluid
every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
5
6
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles,
replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer
towing results in higher transmission and transfer temperatures or
frequently fully loaded. This requires transmission and transfer
fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under
these conditions, have the transmission and transfer fluid changed
every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C),
in very low temperatures (under−20°F,−29°C), or towing a trailer,
replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer
towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid
or frequently fully loaded. This requires differential fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder.
If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the
differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
235
Maintenance Minder
1:
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil1
Replace engine oil1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Date
236
Date
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
Maintenance Record
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Date
Date
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
Maintenance
mi
km
237
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
238
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your Honda to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
239
Maintenance
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Install the engine oil
fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait
a few minutes, and recheck the oil
level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
240
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
7. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4. Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could
cause an oil leak.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
9. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
5. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
241
Maintenance
3. Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
8. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
10.Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to between the
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
242
Always use Honda Long-Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 %
antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
3. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
4. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
RADIATOR CAP
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
243
Maintenance
1. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator will come on when the
level is low.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
DIPSTICK
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid into the tube to bring it to the
upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
244
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Timing Belt
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
Differential Oil
4WD models only
FILLER BOLT
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely. Tightening
torque:
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)
The differential should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Check the fluid level with the
differential at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
differential fluid filler bolt and
washer, and carefully feel inside the
bolt hole with your finger. The fluid
level should be up to the edge of the
bolt hole. If it is not, slowly add
VTM-4 Differential Fluid until it
starts to run out of the hole.
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
245
Maintenance
CORRECT LEVEL
Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
according to the maintenance
message shown on the information
display. Replaced the belt at 60,000
miles (100,000 km) if you regularly
drive your vehicle in one or more of
these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
Brake Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoir monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
246
MAX
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Maintenance
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
247
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be performed by
your dealer or other qualified
mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. Handle a bulb by its steel base,
and protect the glass from contact
with your skin or hard objects. If you
touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs get
very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
scratch on the glass can cause the bulb
to overheat and shatter.
248
TAB
BULB
CONNECTOR
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Bulb
4. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Light Bulbs
2. To remove a bulb, pull it straight
out of its socket.
3. Install the new bulb into the
socket.
4. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Maintenance
1. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. To remove the front turn signal
bulb, push it in slightly and turn it
counterclockwise.
3. Install the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall it.
1. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
249
Lights
5. Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb
6. Insert the socket back into the
turn signal assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1. If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the left, and turn off the engine.
If you are changing the bulb on
the passenger’s side, turn the
steering wheel to the right.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the three holding clips
from the inner fender.
250
3. Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender.
4. Remove the socket from the turn
signal assembly by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.
8. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the three holding clips.
Lock each clip in place by pushing
on the center.
Lights
6. Turn on the fog lights to make
sure the new bulb is working.
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
If equipped
7. Reinstall the mounting bolt on the
under cover.
2. Pull the under cover away from
the bumper.
Maintenance
1. Use a wrench to remove the
mounting bolt from the underbody.
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb into the
assembly and turn it one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
251
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two screws, then pull
the rear light assembly straight
back to remove it from the body.
Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb
3. Remove the socket of the burned
out bulb by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise, and pull it
straight out of its socket.
4. Install a new bulb into the socket,
and reinstall the socket into the
light assembly.
252
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover. Remove the
covers by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Lights
3. Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Replacing the High-mount Brake
Light
4. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
5. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
6. Reinstall the back-up light cover.
1. Place a cloth on the middle edge
of a part of the lens on the
passenger’s side. Remove a part of
the lens by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flip tipped
screwdriver.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the
tailgate.
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw under the lens.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push a new bulb into the
socket until it bottoms. Reinstall
the assembly.
4. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
253
Maintenance
SCREW
Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat Belts
Floor Mats
The driver’s and right second row
floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals or
marking the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
254
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Cleaning Seat Belts
LOOP
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
2. Front only:
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED
255
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Wiper Blades
BLADE
BLADE
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Front only:
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
256
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) will warn you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 205 for
information on the TPMS.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.
257
Maintenance
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Tires
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )
higher than the cold readings. This
is normal. Do not let air out to match
the recommended cold air pressure.
The tire will be underinflated.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
258
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
Tire Size
P235/70R16 104S
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 289 .
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheels weights f or
balancing.
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires at these intervals:
Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time
they are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-toback.
259
Maintenance
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
260
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
16 x 6 1/2 JJ
Tires:
P235/70R16 104S
See page 290 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
291 for tire size explanation.
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Tires
Tire Chains
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving condition or local
laws. Make sure they are the correct
size for your tires. Metal link-type
‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Maintenance
261
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
262
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Disconnect the battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
If possible periodically run the
engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.
Maintenance
Fill the fuel tank.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
263
264
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 266
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 267
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 271
Jump Starting ................................. 272
If the Engine Overheats ............... 274
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 276
Charging System Indicator........... 276
Malfunction Indicator ................... 277
Brake System Indicator ................ 278
Emergency Towing ....................... 278
Fuses ............................................... 279
Fuse Locations ............................... 283
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while
driving.
Do not mount snow chains on it.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
Turn off the VSA system (see
page 212 ). Driving with the
compact spare tire may activate
the VSA system.
266
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
TOOLS
JACK
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
SPARE TIRE
COVER
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
3. The tools and jack are behind a
cover in the cargo area on the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by
pushing the top of it.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
4. Turn the jack’s end
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack and tools.
CONTINUED
267
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
5. The spare tire is stored
underneath the rear cargo area.
Remove the plastic cover on the
cargo area lining to access the
shaft for the spare tire hoist.
BRACKET
6. Put the wheel nut wrench on the
hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground. Keep
turning the wheel nut wrench to
create slack in the cable.
7. Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
268
JACKING POINT
9. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. It is pointed to by a △
mark molded into the underside of
the body. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
11. Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Place the flat
tire on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
12. Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
13. Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
14. Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
16. Remove the center cap from the
flat tire, and place the flat tire up
under the hoist.
CONTINUED
269
Taking Care of the Unexpected
10. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
BRAKE HUB
Changing a Flat Tire
19. Turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the
vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
17. Insert the hoist bracket into the
center hole of the flat tire.
18. Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise to take up the slack of
the hoist cable. Make sure the
bracket is seated in the center
hole of the spare tire.
270
20. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jacks’ end bracket to lock it in
place and replace the tools and
cover.
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 272 .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem (see
Emergency Towing on page 278 ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 262 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
272 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 199 .
271
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound or series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly (see page 64 ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 279 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 278 .
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
272
Jump Starting
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
273
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the accessories, and
turn on the hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 278 ).
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
274
If the Engine Overheats
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
10. Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 278).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
9. Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
11. If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
275
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
276
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 189 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 239 ).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure light. If it does not go out
within ten seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving.
(See Emergency Towing on page
278 ).
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Malfunction Indicator
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emission control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance,
continued operation may cause
serious damage.
If the indicator remains on or the
fuel cap was not loose or missing,
have the vehicle checked by the
dealer as soon as possible.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to State
Emissions Testing for more
information (see page 296 ).
277
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator could come on
because of a loose or missing fuel fill
cap. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
FUEL CAP’’ message on the
information display. Tighten the cap
until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator turn off immediately; it
can take several days of normal
driving.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emission
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It can take
several days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
Brake System Indicator, Emergency Towing
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position, and as a reminder
to check the parking brake. It will
stay on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
U.S.
Canada
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 246 ).
If the fluid level is low, take the
vehicle to your dealer and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
278
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 278 ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
indicator come on with the brake
system indicator, have the vehicle
inspected by your dealer
immediately.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Towing your vehicle with two tires on
the ground will damage parts of the
4WD system. It should be transported
on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.
Emergency Towing, Fuses
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with all four wheels on the
ground, do the following:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D for several seconds,
then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Fuses
DRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes. The interior fuse
boxes are located under the
dashboard on the driver’s and
passenger’s side.
CONTINUED
279
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the all f our wheels of f
the ground.
With all four wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Fuses
To open the passenger’s side, pull
the right edge of the cover.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
283 and 284 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. The diagram for
the interior driver’s side fuse box is
on the kick panel below the fuse box.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
located on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is next to the
battery.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIOR
UNDERHOOD
FUSE
BOX
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
280
Fuses
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
BLOWN
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
CONTINUED
281
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Remove the screws
with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
282
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function, see page
95 .
On EX and EX-L models
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page 139 ).
Trailer Fuses
If a trailer light is burned out, check
if these fuses are blown when you
replace the light bulbs:
Primary under-hood fuse box
fuses 5, 7, and 24
Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10
Interior passenger’s side fuse box:
10
If those fuses are OK, but the trailer
lights still do not work, there are two
blown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailer
hitch wiring. To access the 7.5 amp
fuses:
1. Open the tailgate and remove the
cargo floor lid.
2. Pull out the bottom of the tailgate
rubber seal.
3. Remove rear trim panel by pulling
up on the inside edge of the rear
trim panel, and unhooking the four
clips and tabs.
4. After replacing fuses, and reinstall
the rear trim panel in the reverse
order of removal.
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
20 A
30 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
−
20 A
20 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Right Headlight
ACG S
Hazard
Not used
Stop, Horn
Left Headlight
Radio
Power Window Motor
Power Seat
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
No. Amps.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
30 A
40 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
120 A
30 A
7.5 A
50 A
−
Circuits Protected
Rear A/C
Heater Motor
Cooling Fan
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Battery
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
IGI Main
Trailer (accessory)
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Circuits Protected
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
20 A
40 A
30 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
Circuits Protected
AC INVERTER
VSA F/S Relay
VSA Motor
VTM-4
ACM
Rear Accessory Socket
No. Amps.
7
8
9
10
11
15 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
(20 A)
Circuits Protected
ETCS
IG Coil
LAF
TPMS
(FR FOG)
283
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
Front
1
2
3
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
4
5
6
7
8
9
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10
11
12
13
7.5 A
7.5 A
30 A
−
Fuel Pump
SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Power Mirror, ABS
Daytime Running Light*
ECU (PCM), Cruise Control
OPDS, Rear Wiper
ACC Relay
Back-up Lights, Instrument
Lights
Turn Signals
VTM-4
Front Wiper
Not used
* : Canadian models
No. Amps.
Front
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
−
10 A
20 A
8
20 A
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
15 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
Circuits Protected
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Not used
Daytime Running Light*
Driver’s side Rear Power
Window
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Front Accessory Socket
Small Light
Interior Light
Power Door Lock
Back Up
Moonroof
Moonroof
Passenger’s Side Rear Power
Window
* : Canadian models
284
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 286
Specifications ................................. 288
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 290
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 290
Treadwear .................................. 290
Traction....................................... 290
Temperature .............................. 291
Tire Labeling .............................. 291
285
Technical Information
Emissions Controls........................ 293
The Clean Air Act ...................... 293
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 293
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 293
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 293
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 294
PGM-FI System ..................... 294
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 294
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 294
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 294
Replacement Parts..................... 294
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 295
State Emissions Testing ............... 296
Testing of Readiness Codes ..... 296
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
286
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Technical Information
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
287
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
4WD
2WD
Wheelbase
Track
4WD
2WD
LX
EX
LX
EX
LX
EX
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight*2
rating (GCWR)
188.0 in (4,775 mm)
76.5 in (1,943 mm)
77.5 in (1,968 mm)
70.5 in (1,790 mm)
71.7 in (1,821 mm)
70.1 in (1,780 mm)
71.3 in (1,811 mm)
106.3 in (2,700 mm)
66.3 in (1,685 mm)
66.5 in (1,690 mm)
66.5 in (1,690 mm)
66.7 in (1,694 mm)
See the tire information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
9,700 lbs (4,400 kg) *1
*1 : Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering
fluid cooler.
*2 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
24.7−26.5 oz (700−750 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
Approx.
20.34 US gal (77.0 )
1.93 US gal (7.3 )
2.43 US gal (9.2 )
Change
Total
Change*2
Including
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
filter
Without
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
filter
Total
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Change
Automatic
4WD
transmission
3.5 US qt (3.3 )
4.0 US qt (3.8 )
2WD
fluid
Total
4WD
8.3 US qt (7.9 )
2WD
8.9 US qt (8.4 )
Change
Rear
2.79 US qt (2.64 )
differential
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
washer
reservoir
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.193 US gal (0.73 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Battery
Capacity
288
*1
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
Specifications
Lights
Headlights
High
Low
Front side marker lights
Front position lights
Front turn signal lights
Side turn signal lights
Front fog lights
Rear side marker lights
Rear turn signal/hazard lights
Stop/Taillights
Backup lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Front map lights
Fuses
Interior
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
Under-hood
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
55 W (H11)
60 W (HB3)
5W
5W
21 W (AMBER)
3 CP
55 W
3 CP
21 W/5 W
21 W/5 W
21 CP (18 W)
3 CP
21 CP (18 W)
8 W *1
4 CP *2
5W
5W
1.1 W
3.8 W
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs NGK:
DENSO:
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Tires
Size
Pressure
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
i-VTEC V6 gasoline engine (2WD)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
VTEC V6 gasoline engine (4WD)
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.0 : 1
IZFR5K-11
SKJ16DR-M11
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
−0°66’ (2WD)
−0°50’(4WD)
−0°76’ (2WD)
−0°50’(4WD)
1°98’ (2WD)
1°88’ (4WD)
P235/70R16 104S
T155/90D16 110M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
See page 284 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 284 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 283 or the fuse box
cover.
289
Technical Information
Rear map lights
Cargo area light
Vanity mirror light
Door (Courtesy) light
*1 : EX-L model
*2 : LX and EX models
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.
290
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
P
70
−Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
R
−Rim diameter in inches.
16
−Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Tire Size
104 −Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
−Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
235 −Tire width in millimeters.
S
−Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
P235/70R16 104S
291
Technical Information
Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like this example:
Max Press −The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT −This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R −Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
FW6X −Tire type code.
2202 −Date of manufacture.
292
Maximum Tire Load
Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
234 .
*
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
293
Technical Information
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
294
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
295
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
296
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines
the readiness codes are still not
set, see your dealer.
Technical Information
297
298
Warranty and Customer Relations
299
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 300
Warranty Coverages ..................... 301
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 302
Authorized Manuals ...................... 303
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co.
Honda Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7D
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners:
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
300
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7028
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 286 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2006 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2006 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
301
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
302
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S.only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Form Description
Price
Each*
$75.00
$50.00
2005-2006 Honda Pilot Service Manual
2003-2006 Honda Pilot
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61S9V30
$44.00
2003-2006 Honda Pilot
Body Repair Manual
31S9V630
$34.00
2006 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
31S9V730
$29.00
2006 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31S9VM10
$12.00
2006 Honda Pilot
Honda Service History
31S9VQ30
$12.00
2006 Honda Pilot
Quick Start Guide
HON-R
FREE
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
*
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
VEHICLE MODEL
2
0
0
6
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Price
Total
Each*
Price
Qty
Name
Year
H
O
N
*
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE
$6.95
GRAND TOTAL
303
Authorized Manuals
Publication
Form Number
61S9V03
61S9V03EL
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name,
and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be
sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
S
H
I
P
T
O
Customer Name
Attention
Street Address − No P.O. Box Number
Apartment Number
City
State & Zip Code
Daytime Telephone Number
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
(
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
)
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA
Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
304
Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
Index
A
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 62, 276
Jump Starting ............................. 272
Maintenance ............................... 262
Specifications ............................. 289
Before Driving ............................... 185
Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21
Beverage Holders ............................ 99
Booster Seats ................................... 54
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 209
Break-in, New Linings .............. 186
Bulb Replacement ..................... 252
Fluid ............................................ 246
Parking .......................................... 97
System Indicator .................. 63, 278
Wear Indicators ......................... 209
Braking System.............................. 208
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 186
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 76
Brights, Headlights ......................... 75
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 252
Brake Lights ...................... 252, 253
Front Parking Lights ................. 249
Front Side Marker Lights......... 249
Headlights .................................. 248
High-mount Brake Lights......... 253
Rear Bulbs .................................. 252
Specifications ............................. 289
Turn Signal Light .............. 249, 252
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 248
C
Capacities Chart............................. 288
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Carrying Cargo .............................. 193
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
CD Changer ........................... 131, 134
CD Player........................................ 130
CONTINUED
I
INDEX
Accessories and Modifications .... 191
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 81
Accessory Power Sockets............. 101
AC Power Outlet ............................ 102
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 239
Advanced Airbag System................ 30
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 25
Airbag System Components ........... 25
Air Conditioning System ............... 106
Rear A/C Control ...................... 113
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 258
Antifreeze ....................................... 242
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 209
Indicator ................................ 63, 210
Operation .................................... 209
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 139
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 81
Audio System ................................. 115
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .... 76
Automatic Speed Control.............. 175
Automatic Transmission............... 200
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 288
Checking Fluid Level ................ 244
Shifting ........................................ 200
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 200
Shift Lever Positions ................. 201
Shift Lock Release ..................... 203
Index
Certification Label ......................... 286
Chains ............................................. 261
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 267
Change Oil
How to ......................................... 240
When to....................................... 229
Charging System Indicator .... 62, 276
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 198
Childproof Door Locks ................... 83
Child Seats
LATCH.......................................... 47
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Climate Control System ................ 112
Clock, Setting the .......................... 140
Code, Audio System ...................... 139
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 293
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 199
Compact Spare Tire....................... 266
Console Compartment .................... 99
Consumer Information.................. 300
Controls, Instruments and .............. 59
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 242
Checking ..................................... 189
Proper Solution .......................... 242
Temperature Gauge .................... 71
II
Conversation Mirror .................... 100
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 293
Cruise Control Operation ............. 175
Customer Service Information..... 300
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Dashboard .................................... 4, 60
Daytime Running Lights................. 76
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator ........................................ 67
Dead Battery .................................. 272
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 302
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77
Defrosting the Windows....... 108, 110
Dimensions ..................................... 288
Dimming the Headlights ................ 75
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 244
Engine Oil ................................... 189
Directional Signals..................... 66, 75
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 210
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 241
Doors
Locking and Unlocking ............... 82
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 290
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7
Driving ............................................ 197
Economy ..................................... 190
DVD Player .................................... 142
DVD Player Error Message ......... 171
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 190
Emergencies on the Road............. 265
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 272
Brake System Indicator ............ 278
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 267
Charging System Indicator ...... 276
Checking the Fuses................... 279
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 276
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 277
Overheated Engine ................... 274
Emergency Brake ............................ 97
Emergency Flashers ....................... 77
Emergency Towing ....................... 278
Emissions Controls........................ 293
Emissions Testing, State .............. 296
Index
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 71
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 62, 277
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 276
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 239
Overheating................................ 274
Specifications ............................. 289
Speed Limiter ............................. 202
Starting........................................ 199
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 293
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 57
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 294
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 19
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 244
Brake ........................................... 246
Power Steering........................... 247
Windshield Washers ................. 243
Folding the Third Seat .................... 89
Four-way Flashers ........................... 77
Fuel .................................................. 186
Cap Message ................................ 72
Fill Door and Cap....................... 187
Gauge ............................................ 70
Octane Requirement ................. 186
Reserve Indicator......................... 67
Tank, Filling the......................... 187
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 279
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 71
Fuel ................................................ 70
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 214
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) ........................................ 214
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 200
Glove Box ......................................... 99
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 214
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 248
Hazard Warning Button .................. 77
G
F
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 190
Gasoline .......................................... 186
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 67
Gauge ............................................ 70
Octane Requirement ................. 186
Tank, Filling the......................... 187
Gas Station Procedures................. 187
INDEX
Fan, Interior.................................... 106
Features .......................................... 105
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 187
Filters
Oil ................................................ 240
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 77
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 267
CONTINUED
III
Index
Headlights......................................... 75
Aiming ......................................... 248
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 76
Daytime Running Lights............. 76
High Beam Indicator ................... 67
High Beams, Turning on ............ 75
Low Beams, Turning on ............. 75
Reminder Chime .......................... 76
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 248
Turning on .................................... 75
Headphones.................................... 172
Head Restraints ............................... 91
Heated Mirror .................................. 93
Heater, Seat ...................................... 86
Heating and Cooling ...................... 106
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 199
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 75
High-mount Brake Light............... 253
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 180
Hood, Opening the ........................ 188
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 286
IV
Ignition
Keys............................................... 79
Switch ............................................ 81
Timing Control System ............. 294
Immobilizer System......................... 79
Important Handling Information .... iii
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 61
Infant Restraint ................................ 43
Infant Seats ....................................... 43
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 257
Inside Mirror .................................... 92
Inspection, Tire .............................. 258
Installing a Child Seat
LATCH.......................................... 47
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Instrument Panel ......................... 5, 61
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 268
Jack, Tire ........................................ 267
Jump Starting ................................. 272
K
Keys ................................................... 79
L
Label, Certification ........................ 286
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 75
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 22
LATCH Anchorage System............ 47
Lights ........................................ 75, 102
Bulb Replacement ..................... 248
Indicator ........................................ 61
Parking .......................................... 75
Turn Signal ................................... 75
Load Limits..................................... 194
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 81
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 81
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 187
Glove Box ..................................... 99
Lockout Prevention ..................... 82
Power Door .................................. 82
Low Coolant Level ......................... 189
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 67
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 276
Index
Lower Anchor .................................. 47
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 288
Luggage .......................................... 193
M
Maintenance ................................... 227
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 234
Record .................................. 236-237
Minder ................................. 229-235
Minder Indicator .......................... 69
Safety........................................... 228
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 277
Manual Seat Adjustments............... 88
Meters, Gauges ................................ 70
Modifications.................................. 192
Moonroof .......................................... 96
N
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 186
Odometer .......................................... 70
Odometer, Trip ................................ 70
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 223
Off-Road Precautions .................... 223
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 240
Change, When to ....................... 229
Checking Engine ....................... 189
Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 276
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 239
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 81
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 293
Outside Mirrors ............................... 93
Overheating, Engine ..................... 274
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 234
Parking Brake .................................. 97
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ................................ 63, 278
Parking Lights.................................. 75
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 295
Playing the Radio ........................... 117
Playing a Disc ................................. 130
Playing the Disc Changer ..... 131, 134
PGM-FI System.............................. 294
Power Seat Adjustments ................. 87
Power Socket Locations.................. 98
Power Windows ............................... 94
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 12
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Protecting Children ......................... 38
Protecting Infants ............................ 43
Protecting Larger Children ............ 53
Protecting Small Children .............. 44
P
Panel Brightness Control ............... 76
Park Gear Position......................... 201
Parking ............................................ 207
INDEX
Neutral Gear Position.................... 201
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 186
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 286
O
CONTINUED
V
Index
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 274
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 115
Readiness Codes ............................ 296
Rear A/C Unit ................................ 113
Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 147
Rear Entertainment System ......... 142
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 252
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 184
Rear View Mirror ............................. 92
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 74
Reclining the Seat Backs ........... 87-90
Reminder Lights .............................. 61
Remoto Audio Controls ................ 138
Remote Control (RES) .................. 169
Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 240
Floor Mats .................................. 254
Fuses ........................................... 279
Light Bulbs ................................. 248
Minder......................................... 235
Timing Belt ................................. 245
Tires ............................................ 259
VI
Wiper Blades .............................. 255
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 23
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 189
Restraint, Child ................................ 38
Reverse Gear Position................... 201
Rotation, Tire ................................. 259
S
Safety Belts....................................... 10
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 302
Safety Features .................................. 9
Airbags .......................................... 11
Seat Belts ...................................... 10
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 58
Safety Messages ................................ ii
Seat Belts .......................................... 10
Additional Information ................ 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 23
Cleaning ...................................... 254
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22
Maintenance ................................. 23
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 21, 62
System Components.................... 25
Use During Pregnancy................ 19
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 15
Seat Heaters ..................................... 86
Seats .................................................. 87
Folding the Second Seat ............. 89
Folding the Third Seat ................ 90
Head Restraints ........................... 91
Reclining the Second Seat .......... 89
Reclining the Third Seat ............. 90
Third Seat Access ........................ 89
Seats, Adjusting the .................... 87-90
Security System ............................. 174
Serial Number ................................ 286
Service Intervals ............................ 229
Service Manual .............................. 303
Service Station Procedures .......... 187
Setting the Clock ........................... 140
Shifting the Automatic
Transmission .............................. 200
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 200
Shift Lock Release ......................... 203
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement in .......................... 249
Side Airbags ............................... 11, 31
Off Indicator ........................... 34, 63
Index
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 78
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 81
Buttons................................ 138, 175
Stereo Sound System .................... 115
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 263
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 100
Sun Visor......................................... 101
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 36
SRS Indicator.......................... 33, 63
System Components.................... 25
Synthetic Oil ................................... 240
Temperature, Outside ..................... 71
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 23
Testing of Readiness Codes ......... 296
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51
Theft Protection............................. 139
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 295
Time, Setting the ........................... 140
Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 78
Timing Belt ..................................... 245
Tire Chains ..................................... 261
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 267
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 205
T
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 252
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 265
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 290
Emissions Control Systems ...... 293
State Emissions Testing ........... 296
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 295
Temperature Gauge ........................ 71
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 114
INDEX
Signaling Turns ................................ 75
Snow Tires ...................................... 260
Sound System ................................. 115
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 266
Specifications ............................. 289
Specifications Charts..................... 288
Speed Control ................................. 175
SRS, Additional Information........... 25
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Airbag Service .............................. 36
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Work ......................... 34
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 31
SRS Components ......................... 25
SRS Indicator.............................. 33, 63
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 81
Starting the Engine........................ 199
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 199
With a Dead Battery ................. 272
State Emissions Testing ............... 296
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 274
CONTINUED
VII
Index
Tires ................................................ 257
Air Pressure ............................... 257
Checking Wear .......................... 258
Compact Spare ........................... 266
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 290
Inflation ....................................... 257
Inspection ................................... 258
Maintenance ............................... 259
Replacing .................................... 260
Rotating....................................... 259
Snow ............................................ 260
Specifications ............................. 289
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 267
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 213
Emergency Wrecker ................. 278
Equipment and Accessories ..... 219
Traction Devices........................ 261
Weight Limit .............................. 215
Trailer Driving Tips....................... 220
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 244
Fluid Selection............................ 244
Identification Number............... 286
Shifting the Automatic .............. 200
VIII
Treadwear ...................................... 290
Trip Meter ........................................ 70
Turn Signals ..................................... 75
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 265
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 290
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 186
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 241
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 101
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 194
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 288
Vehicle Identification Number..... 286
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 211
VSA Off Switch .......................... 212
Vehicle Storage .............................. 263
VIN .................................................. 286
Viscosity, Oil................................... 239
VTM-4 Lock ................................... 204
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 58
Warranty Coverages ..................... 301
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 243
Level Indicator ............................. 67
Operation ...................................... 74
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 78
Alignment and Balance ............. 259
Compact Spare ........................... 266
Nut Wrench ................................ 269
Windows
Operating the Power ................... 94
Rear, Defogger ............................ 77
Windshield
Defroster ............................ 108, 110
Washers ........................................ 74
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 255
Operation ...................................... 74
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer ...................................... 74
Wireless Headphones ................... 172
Index
Worn Tires ..................................... 258
Wrecker, Emergency Towing...... 278
INDEX
IX
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
20.34 US gal (77.0 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 239 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
244 ).
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 247 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 246 ).
Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page 245 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement